blob: 1a26a375feb86e0222c7fdb3ae12b7ee2729dc96 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200294 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100302 */
303enum ieee80211_bss_change {
304 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300316 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200328
329 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100330};
331
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300332/*
333 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
334 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
335 * filtering will be disabled.
336 */
337#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
338
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100339/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200340 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
341 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200342 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300343 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300344 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
345 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
346 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700347 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200348enum ieee80211_event_type {
349 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200350 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300351 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300352 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353};
354
355/**
356 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
357 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
359 */
360enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700361 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
362 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
363};
364
365/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200367 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
368 */
369struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
370 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
371};
372
373/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200374 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
375 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200376 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200377 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
378 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200379 */
380enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
381 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200382 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200383 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200385};
386
387/**
388 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
389 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
390 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
391 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
394 MLME_SUCCESS,
395 MLME_DENIED,
396 MLME_TIMEOUT,
397};
398
399/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200400 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
402 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
403 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
404 */
405struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
406 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
408 u16 reason;
409};
410
411/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300412 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
413 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
414 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300415 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300416 */
417struct ieee80211_ba_event {
418 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
419 u16 tid;
420 u16 ssn;
421};
422
423/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200425 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200426 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200427 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200430 */
431struct ieee80211_event {
432 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
433 union {
434 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 } u;
438};
439
440/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200441 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
442 *
443 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
444 *
445 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
446 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
447 */
448struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
449 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
450 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
451};
452
453/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
455 *
456 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
457 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
458 *
459 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200460 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
461 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530462 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100463 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
464 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200465 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
466 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100467 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200468 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300469 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200470 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
472 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
473 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
474 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200475 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200476 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
477 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100479 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
480 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
482 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
483 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700484 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800485 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200486 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
487 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
488 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300489 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100490 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200491 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
492 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100493 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
494 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200495 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100496 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300497 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
498 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
499 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200500 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200501 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
502 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
503 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100504 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
505 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
506 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
507 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200508 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300509 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
510 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
511 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
512 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100513 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
514 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
515 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200516 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200517 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
518 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
519 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300520 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
521 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200522 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300523 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
524 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200525 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100526 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
527 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
528 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
529 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
530 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
531 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100532 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200533 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
534 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
535 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100536 */
537struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200538 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100539 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200540 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530541 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100542 u16 aid;
543 /* erp related data */
544 bool use_cts_prot;
545 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300546 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200547 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800548 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700549 u16 beacon_int;
550 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200551 u64 sync_tsf;
552 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100553 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100554 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300555 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200556 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200557 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200558 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
559 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100560 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
561 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100562 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200563 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300564 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100565 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200566 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200567 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300568 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300569 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
570 size_t ssid_len;
571 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200572 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100573 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100574 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200575 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100576};
577
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800578/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200579 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800580 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700581 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800582 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100583 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200584 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
585 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
586 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
587 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
588 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
589 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
590 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
591 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
592 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
593 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
594 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
597 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200598 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200599 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
600 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200601 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200602 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200603 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
604 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
605 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
606 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
607 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
608 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
609 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
610 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200611 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
612 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
613 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300614 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
615 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200616 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
617 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
618 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600619 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
620 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
621 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100622 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
623 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
624 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200625 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
626 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200627 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
628 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100629 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
630 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
631 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200632 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
633 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
634 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
635 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100636 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
637 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
638 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100639 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
640 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
641 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200642 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
643 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
644 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200646 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
647 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100648 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
649 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
650 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
651 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200652 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
653 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
654 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530655 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
656 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
657 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200658 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
659 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
660 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200661 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
662 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530663 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
664 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
665 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200666 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
667 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
668 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530669 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
670 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
671 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
672 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
673 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200674 *
675 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
676 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800677 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200678enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
682 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
683 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
684 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
685 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
687 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
688 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
689 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
690 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600692 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200695 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100698 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100699 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200700 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400701 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100703 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200704 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530705 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200706 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200708 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530709 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200710};
711
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200712#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
713
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200714/**
715 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
716 *
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
718 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530719 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
720 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100722 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200724 *
725 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
726 */
727enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
728 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530729 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100730 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100731 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200732 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200733};
734
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200735/*
736 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
737 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
738 */
739#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
741 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
742 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
743 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100744 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200746 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200747
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530748/**
749 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
750 * Rate Control algorithm.
751 *
752 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
753 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
754 *
755 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
757 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
758 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
761 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530762 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
763 * Greenfield mode.
764 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100765 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
767 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530768 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
769 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
770 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
772 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200773enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
777
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100778 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
780 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
781 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
782 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
783 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100784 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
785 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
786 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800787};
788
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200789
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200790/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
791#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200792
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200793/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
794#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
795
796/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200797#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200798
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200799/* maximum number of rate table entries */
800#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
801
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200802/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200803 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200804 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200805 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
806 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200807 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200808 *
809 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
810 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
811 *
812 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
813 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200814 *
815 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
816 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
817 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
818 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300819 * information::
820 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200821 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300822 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200823 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
824 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
825 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
826 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300827 * information should then contain::
828 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200829 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300830 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200831 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
832 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200833 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200834struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
835 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100836 u16 count:5,
837 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000838} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200839
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100840#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
841
842static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
843 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
844{
845 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200846 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
847 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100848}
849
850static inline u8
851ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
852{
853 return rate->idx & 0xF;
854}
855
856static inline u8
857ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
858{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200859 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100860}
861
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200862/**
863 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200864 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200865 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
866 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
867 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
868 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
869 *
870 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200871 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200872 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100873 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700874 * @control: union for control data
875 * @status: union for status data
876 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100877 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700878 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100879 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700880 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200881 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200882 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200883struct ieee80211_tx_info {
884 /* common information */
885 u32 flags;
886 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200887
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200888 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100889
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100890 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100891
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200892 union {
893 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200894 union {
895 /* rate control */
896 struct {
897 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
898 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
899 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200900 u8 use_rts:1;
901 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200902 u8 short_preamble:1;
903 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200904 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200905 };
906 /* only needed before rate control */
907 unsigned long jiffies;
908 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200909 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +0200910 union {
911 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
913
914 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
915 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
916 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
917 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
918 * sojourn time computation.
919 */
920 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
921 };
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200922 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200923 u32 flags;
924 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200925 } control;
926 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200927 u64 cookie;
928 } ack;
929 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200930 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200931 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200932 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100933 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200934 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300935 u16 tx_time;
936 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200937 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200938 struct {
939 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
940 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200941 u8 pad[4];
942
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200943 void *rate_driver_data[
944 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
945 };
946 void *driver_data[
947 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200948 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700949};
950
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300951/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200952 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
953 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200954 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
955 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
956 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200957 *
958 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
959 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
960 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
961 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
962 */
963struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200964 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
965 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200966 const u8 *common_ies;
967 size_t common_ie_len;
968};
969
970
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200971static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
972{
973 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
974}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400975
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200976static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
977{
978 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
979}
980
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200981/**
982 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
983 *
984 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
985 *
986 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
987 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
988 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
989 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
990 *
991 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
992 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
993 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
994 */
995static inline void
996ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
997{
998 int i;
999
1000 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1001 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1002 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1003 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1004 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1005 /* clear the rate counts */
1006 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1007 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1008
1009 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001010 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001011 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1012 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1013 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1014}
1015
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001016
1017/**
1018 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1019 *
1020 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1021 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1022 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1023 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001024 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1025 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001026 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001027 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1028 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001029 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1030 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1031 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1032 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001033 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1034 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001035 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1036 * the frame.
1037 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1038 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001039 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001040 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1041 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1042 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001043 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1044 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1045 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001046 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1047 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001048 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001049 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001050 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001051 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1052 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001053 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1054 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001055 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1056 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1057 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001058 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1059 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1060 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001061 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1062 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1063 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1064 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1065 * on this subframe
1066 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1067 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001068 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1069 * done by the hardware
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001070 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001071 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1072 * processing it in any regular way.
1073 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1074 * them for sniffing purposes.
1075 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1076 * monitor interfaces.
1077 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1078 * them for sniffing purposes.
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001079 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001080 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1081 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001082 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1083 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1084 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1085 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1086 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1087 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1088 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1089 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1090 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001091 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1092 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1093 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001094 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1095 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1096 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001097 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1098 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001099 */
1100enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001101 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1102 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001103 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001104 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1105 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1106 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1107 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001108 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001109 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1110 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1111 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1112 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1113 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1114 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1115 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001116 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001117 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001118 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1119 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1120 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1121 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001122 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001123 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001124 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001125 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1126 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001127 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001128 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1129 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001130 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001131 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001132 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(32),
1133 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT_ULL(33),
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001134 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(34),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001135};
1136
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001137#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1138
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001139/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001140 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1141 *
1142 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1143 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1144 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001145 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001146 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001147 */
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001148
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001149enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1150 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001151 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1152 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001153};
1154
1155/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001156 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1157 *
1158 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1159 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001160 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001161 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001162 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1163 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001164 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1165 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001166 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1167 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001168 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001169 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001170 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1171 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001172 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1173 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1174 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001175 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1176 * values were filled.
1177 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1178 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001179 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001180 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001181 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1182 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001183 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1184 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_\*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001185 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001186 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1187 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1188 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001189 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001190struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1191 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001192 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001193 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001194 u32 ampdu_reference;
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001195 u64 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001196 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001197 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001198 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001199 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001200 u8 rx_flags;
1201 u8 band;
1202 u8 antenna;
1203 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001204 u8 chains;
1205 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001206 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001207};
1208
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001209/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001210 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1211 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1212 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1213 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1214 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1215 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1216 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1217 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1218 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1219 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1220 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1221 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1222 * @data field.
1223 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1224 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1225 * length
1226 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1227 *
1228 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1229 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1230 * data.
1231 */
1232struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1233 u32 present;
1234 u8 align;
1235 u8 oui[3];
1236 u8 subns;
1237 u8 pad;
1238 u16 len;
1239 u8 data[];
1240} __packed;
1241
1242/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001243 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1244 *
1245 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1246 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001247 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1248 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1249 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001250 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1251 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1252 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1253 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1254 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1255 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1256 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001257 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1258 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1259 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1260 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1261 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001262 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1263 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001264 */
1265enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001266 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001267 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001268 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001269 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001270};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001271
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001272
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001273/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001274 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1275 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001276 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001277 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001278 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001279 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001280 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001281 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001282 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001283 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001284 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1285 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001286 */
1287enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001288 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001289 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001290 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001291 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001292 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1293 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1294 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001295 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001296};
1297
1298/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001299 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1300 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001301 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1302 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1303 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1304 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1305 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001306 */
1307enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1308 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1309 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1310 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1311 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1312
1313 /* keep last */
1314 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1315};
1316
1317/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001318 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1319 *
1320 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1321 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001322 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1323 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001324 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001325 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1326 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1327 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001328 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1329 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1330 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1331 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001332 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1333 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001334 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001335 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001336 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001337 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001338 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001339 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1340 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001341 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001342 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1343 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001344 *
1345 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1346 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001347 * configured for an HT channel.
1348 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1349 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001350 */
1351struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001352 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001353 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001354
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001355 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001356 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001357
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001358 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1359
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001360 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001361 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001362 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001363};
1364
1365/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001366 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1367 *
1368 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1369 * operation.
1370 *
1371 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1372 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1373 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1374 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001375 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1376 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001377 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1378 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001379 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001380 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1381 */
1382struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1383 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001384 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001385 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001386 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001387 u8 count;
1388};
1389
1390/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001391 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1392 *
1393 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1394 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001395 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1396 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1397 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1398 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001399 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1400 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1401 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1402 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001403 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1404 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1405 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001406 */
1407enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1408 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001409 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001410 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001411 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001412};
1413
1414/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001415 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1416 *
1417 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1418 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1419 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001420 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001421 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1422 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001423 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001424 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1425 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001426 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1427 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1428 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001429 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001430 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1431 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1432 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1433 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001434 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1435 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001436 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1437 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1438 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1439 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1440 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001441 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001442 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001443 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001444 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1445 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001446 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001447 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001448 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001449 */
1450struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001451 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001452 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001453 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001454 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001455 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001456 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001457
1458 u8 cab_queue;
1459 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1460
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001461 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1462
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001463 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1464
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001465 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001466
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001467#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1468 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1469#endif
1470
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001471 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1472
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001473 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001474 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001475};
1476
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001477static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1478{
1479#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001480 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001481#endif
1482 return false;
1483}
1484
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001485/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001486 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1487 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1488 *
1489 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1490 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1491 *
1492 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1493 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1494 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1495 */
1496struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1497
1498/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001499 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1500 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1501 *
1502 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1503 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1504 *
1505 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1506 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1507 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1508 */
1509struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1510
1511/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001512 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1513 *
1514 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1515 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1516 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001517 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1518 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001519 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1520 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001521 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1522 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1523 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001524 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1525 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001526 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001527 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1528 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001529 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001530 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001531 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001532 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1533 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1534 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001535 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1536 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1537 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1538 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1539 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1540 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1541 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001542 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001543 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001544 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001545 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1546 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1547 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001548 */
1549enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001550 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1551 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1552 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1553 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1554 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1555 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1556 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001557 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001558};
1559
1560/**
1561 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1562 *
1563 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1564 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1565 *
1566 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1567 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001568 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001569 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001570 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1571 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001572 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1573 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1574 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001575 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1576 * data block:
1577 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1578 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1579 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001580 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1581 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001582 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001583struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001584 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001585 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001586 u8 icv_len;
1587 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001588 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001589 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001590 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001591 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001592 u8 key[0];
1593};
1594
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001595#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1596
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001597#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1598#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1599
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001600/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001601 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1602 *
1603 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1604 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1605 * reverse order than in packet)
1606 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1607 * reverse order than in packet)
1608 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1609 * reverse order than in packet)
1610 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1611 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001612 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001613 */
1614struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1615 union {
1616 struct {
1617 u32 iv32;
1618 u16 iv16;
1619 } tkip;
1620 struct {
1621 u8 pn[6];
1622 } ccmp;
1623 struct {
1624 u8 pn[6];
1625 } aes_cmac;
1626 struct {
1627 u8 pn[6];
1628 } aes_gmac;
1629 struct {
1630 u8 pn[6];
1631 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001632 struct {
1633 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1634 u8 seq_len;
1635 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001636 };
1637};
1638
1639/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001640 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1641 *
1642 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1643 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1644 *
1645 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1646 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1647 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1648 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1649 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1650 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1651 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1652 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1653 * key_idx value calculation:
1654 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1655 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1656 */
1657struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1658 u32 cipher;
1659 u16 iftype;
1660 u8 hdr_len;
1661 u8 pn_len;
1662 u8 pn_off;
1663 u8 key_idx_off;
1664 u8 key_idx_mask;
1665 u8 key_idx_shift;
1666 u8 mic_len;
1667};
1668
1669/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001670 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1671 *
1672 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1673 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1674 *
1675 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1676 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1677 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001678enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001679 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001680};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001681
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001682/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001683 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1684 *
1685 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1686 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1687 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1688 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1689 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1690 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1691 */
1692enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1693 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1694 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1695 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1696 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1697 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1698 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1699};
1700
1701/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001702 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1703 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1704 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1705 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1706 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1707 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1708 *
1709 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1710 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1711 */
1712enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1713 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1714 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1715 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1716 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1717};
1718
1719/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001720 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1721 *
1722 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001723 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001724 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1725 */
1726struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1727 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1728 struct {
1729 s8 idx;
1730 u8 count;
1731 u8 count_cts;
1732 u8 count_rts;
1733 u16 flags;
1734 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1735};
1736
1737/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001738 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1739 *
1740 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1741 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1742 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1743 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1744 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001745 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001746 *
1747 * @addr: MAC address
1748 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001749 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001750 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1751 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001752 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1753 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1754 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001755 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1756 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001757 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001758 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001759 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001760 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1761 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001762 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001763 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001764 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1765 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1766 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1767 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001768 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001769 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001770 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001771 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1772 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301773 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001774 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1775 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1776 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001777 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001778 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001779 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001780 */
1781struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001782 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001783 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1784 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001785 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001786 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001787 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001788 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001789 u8 uapsd_queues;
1790 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001791 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001792 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001793 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001794 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001795 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001796 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301797 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001798 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001799
1800 /**
1801 * @max_amsdu_len:
1802 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1803 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1804 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1805 *
1806 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1807 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1808 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1809 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1810 *
1811 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1812 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1813 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1814 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001815 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001816 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001817 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001818
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001819 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1820
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001821 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001822 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001823};
1824
1825/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001826 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1827 *
1828 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301829 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001830 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001831 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1832 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1833 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001834enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001835 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1836};
1837
1838/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001839 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1840 *
1841 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1842 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1843 */
1844struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1845 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1846};
1847
1848/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001849 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1850 *
1851 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1852 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1853 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1854 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001855 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001856 *
1857 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1858 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1859 */
1860struct ieee80211_txq {
1861 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1862 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1863 u8 tid;
1864 u8 ac;
1865
1866 /* must be last */
1867 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1868};
1869
1870/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001871 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1872 *
1873 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1874 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1875 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1876 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1877 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1878 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001879 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1880 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1881 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1882 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1883 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1884 * algorithm.
1885 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1886 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1887 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1888 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1889 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1890 * CCK frames.
1891 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001892 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1893 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1894 * the FCS at the end.
1895 *
1896 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1897 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1898 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1899 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1900 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1901 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001902 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001903 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001904 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1905 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1906 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1907 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1908 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001909 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1910 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1911 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1912 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1913 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001914 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1915 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1916 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301917 *
1918 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1919 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001920 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001921 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1922 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1923 *
1924 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1925 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1926 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1927 *
1928 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1929 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001930 *
1931 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1932 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001933 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301934 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1935 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1936 * the stack.
1937 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001938 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001939 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1940 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001941 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001942 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1943 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1944 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001945 *
1946 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1947 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1948 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1949 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1950 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1951 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001952 *
1953 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1954 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1955 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1956 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1957 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1958 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001959 *
1960 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1961 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1962 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001963 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001964 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1965 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1966 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001967 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001968 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1969 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1970 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1971 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001972 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1973 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1974 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1975 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1976 * supported cipher suites.
1977 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001978 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1979 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1980 * for frames.
1981 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001982 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1983 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1984 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1985 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001986 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001987 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1988 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1989 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001990 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1991 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1992 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001993 *
1994 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1995 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001996 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001997 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1998 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1999 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2000 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002001 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2002 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2003 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2004 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002005 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002006 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2007 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2008 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002009 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002010 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002011 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002012 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2013 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2014 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002015 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2016 * within A-MPDU.
2017 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002018 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2019 * for sent beacons.
2020 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002021 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2022 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2023 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2024 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2025 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002026 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2027 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2028 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2029 * timeout.
2030 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002031 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2032 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2033 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002034 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2035 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2036 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2037 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2038 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2039 *
2040 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2041 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2042 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302043 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2044 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2045 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2046 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2047 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002048 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2049 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2050 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2051 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002052 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002053 */
2054enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002055 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2056 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2057 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2058 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2059 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2060 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2061 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2062 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2063 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2064 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2065 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2066 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2067 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2068 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2069 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2070 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2071 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2072 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2073 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2074 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2075 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2076 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2077 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2078 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2079 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2080 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2081 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2082 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2083 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002084 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002085 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002086 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002087 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002088 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002089 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002090 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2091 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302092 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002093 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002094
2095 /* keep last, obviously */
2096 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002097};
2098
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002099/**
2100 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002101 *
2102 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2103 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2104 *
2105 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2106 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2107 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002108 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2109 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002110 *
2111 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2112 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002113 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2114 * along with this structure.
2115 *
2116 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2117 *
2118 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2119 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2120 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002121 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2122 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002123 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002124 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002125 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002126 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002127 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002128 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002129 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002130 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002131 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2132 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2133 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002134 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2135 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2136 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002137 *
2138 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2139 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002140 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2141 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002142 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2143 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002144 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2145 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002146 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002147 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2148 * can handle.
2149 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2150 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002151 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002152 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002153 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2154 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2155 * aggregation.
2156 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2157 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2158 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002159 *
2160 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002161 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2162 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2163 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2164 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002165 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002166 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2167 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2168 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002169 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2170 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002171 *
2172 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2173 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002174 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002175 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002176 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002177 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2178 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002179 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002180 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002181 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2182 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2183 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2184 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2185 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2186 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2187 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2188 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002189 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002190 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2191 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002192 *
2193 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2194 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2195 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2196 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2197 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2198 * neither enabled.
2199 *
2200 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2201 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2202 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002203 *
2204 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2205 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2206 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002207 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2208 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002209 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002210struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002211 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002212 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002213 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002214 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002215 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002216 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002217 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002218 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002219 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002220 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002221 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002222 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002223 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002224 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002225 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002226 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002227 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002228 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002229 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002230 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002231 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002232 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002233 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002234 struct {
2235 int units_pos;
2236 s16 accuracy;
2237 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002238 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002239 u8 uapsd_queues;
2240 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002241 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2242 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002243 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002244};
2245
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002246static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2247 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2248{
2249 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2250}
2251#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2252
2253static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2254 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2255{
2256 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2257}
2258#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2259
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002260/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002261 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2262 *
2263 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2264 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2265 */
2266struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2267 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2268
2269 /* Keep last */
2270 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2271};
2272
2273/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002274 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2275 *
2276 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2277 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2278 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2279 * @status: channel-switch response status
2280 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2281 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2282 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2283 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2284 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2285 */
2286struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2287 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2288 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2289 u8 action_code;
2290 u32 status;
2291 u32 timestamp;
2292 u16 switch_time;
2293 u16 switch_timeout;
2294 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2295 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2296};
2297
2298/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002299 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2300 *
2301 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2302 *
2303 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2304 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2305 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2306 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2307 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002308 *
2309 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002310 */
2311struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2312
2313/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002314 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2315 *
2316 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2317 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2318 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002319static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2320{
2321 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2322}
2323
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002324/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002325 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002326 *
2327 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2328 * @addr: the address to set
2329 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002330static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002331{
2332 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2333}
2334
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002335static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2336ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002337 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002338{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002339 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002340 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002341 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002342}
2343
2344static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2345ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002346 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002347{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002348 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002349 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002350 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002351}
2352
2353static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2354ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002355 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002356{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002357 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002358 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002359 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002360}
2361
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002362/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002363 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2364 * @hw: the hardware
2365 * @skb: the skb
2366 *
2367 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2368 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2369 */
2370void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2371
2372/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002373 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002374 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002375 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2376 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2377 *
2378 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2379 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002380 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2381 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2382 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002383 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2384 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2385 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002386 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2387 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2388 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2389 *
2390 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2391 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2392 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2393 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2394 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002395 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2396 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2397 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2398 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2399 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002400 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2401 *
2402 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2403 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2404 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2405 * based on the receive flags.
2406 *
2407 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2408 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2409 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2410 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002411 *
2412 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2413 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2414 * handler.
2415 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002416 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002417 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2418 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002419 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002420 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002421 *
2422 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2423 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2424 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002425 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002426
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002427/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002428 * DOC: Powersave support
2429 *
2430 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2431 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002432 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2433 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2434 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2435 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2436 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2437 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2438 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2439 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002440 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002441 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2442 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2443 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002444 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2445 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002446 *
2447 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2448 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2449 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002450 *
2451 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2452 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2453 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2454 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002455 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2456 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002457 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002458 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002459 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2460 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2461 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2462 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2463 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2464 * periods.
2465 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002466 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002467 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2468 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2469 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2470 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2471 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2472 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2473 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2474 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2475 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2476 *
2477 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002478 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002479 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002480 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2481 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2482 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2483 *
2484 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2485 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002486 */
2487
2488/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002489 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2490 *
2491 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002492 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002493 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2494 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2495 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2496 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2497 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2498 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002499 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2500 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002501 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2502 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2503 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2504 *
2505 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2506 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2507 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2508 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2509 *
2510 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2511 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2512 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2513 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002514 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002515 * - a list of information element IDs
2516 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2517 *
2518 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2519 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2520 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2521 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2522 * vendor information elements.
2523 *
2524 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2525 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2526 *
2527 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2528 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2529 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2530 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2531 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2532 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2533 *
2534 *
2535 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2536 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2537 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2538 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2539 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2540 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2541 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2542 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2543 *
2544 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2545 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2546 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002547 */
2548
2549/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002550 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2551 *
2552 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2553 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2554 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2555 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2556 *
2557 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2558 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2559 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2560 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2561 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2562 * hardware flags.
2563 *
2564 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2565 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2566 * turned off otherwise.
2567 *
2568 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2569 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2570 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2571 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2572 */
2573
2574/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002575 * DOC: Frame filtering
2576 *
2577 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2578 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2579 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2580 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2581 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2582 *
2583 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2584 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2585 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2586 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002587 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2588 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2589 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2590 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2591 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2592 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2593 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002594 *
2595 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2596 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2597 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2598 * or dropped.
2599 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002600 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2601 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2602 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2603 * the flag, but not clear it.
2604 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2605 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2606 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2607 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2608 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2609 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2610 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2611 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002612 */
2613
2614/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002615 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2616 *
2617 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2618 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2619 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2620 *
2621 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2622 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2623 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2624 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2625 * the driver code.
2626 *
2627 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2628 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2629 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2630 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2631 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2632 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2633 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2634 *
2635 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2636 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2637 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2638 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2639 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2640 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2641 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2642 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2643 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2644 * @sta_notify callback.
2645 *
2646 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2647 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2648 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2649 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2650 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2651 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2652 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002653 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002654 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2655 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2656 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2657 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2658 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2659 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2660 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002661 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2662 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2663 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002664 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2665 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2666 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2667 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2668 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2669 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2670 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2671 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2672 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2673 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2674 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2675 *
2676 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2677 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2678 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2679 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2680 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2681 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2682 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2683 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2684 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2685 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002686 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002687 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2688 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2689 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2690 *
2691 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2692 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2693 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2694 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2695 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002696 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002697 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2698 *
2699 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2700 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2701 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2702 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002703 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002704 *
2705 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2706 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2707 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2708 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002709 */
2710
2711/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002712 * DOC: HW queue control
2713 *
2714 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2715 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2716 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2717 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2718 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2719 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2720 *
2721 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2722 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2723 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2724 *
2725 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2726 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2727 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2728 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2729 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2730 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2731 * the hardware queue.
2732 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2733 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2734 *
2735 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2736 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2737 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2738 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2739 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2740 *
2741 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2742 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2743 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2744 * off-channel queue: 9
2745 *
2746 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2747 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2748 *
2749 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2750 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2751 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2752 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2753 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2754 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2755 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2756 *
2757 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2758 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2759 *
2760 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2761 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2762 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2763 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2764 */
2765
2766/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002767 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2768 *
2769 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2770 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2771 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2772 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2773 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002774 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2775 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2776 * multicast address.
2777 *
2778 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2779 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2780 *
2781 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2782 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2783 *
2784 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2785 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2786 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2787 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2788 * honour this flag if possible.
2789 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002790 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2791 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002792 *
2793 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002794 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002795 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002796 *
2797 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002798 */
2799enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002800 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2801 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2802 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2803 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2804 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2805 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002806 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002807 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002808};
2809
2810/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002811 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2812 *
2813 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2814 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002815 *
2816 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2817 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002818 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002819 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2820 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002821 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2822 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2823 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002824 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002825 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2826 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2827 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2828 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2829 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2830 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2831 * session is gone and removes the station.
2832 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2833 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2834 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2835 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002836 */
2837enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2838 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2839 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002840 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002841 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2842 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2843 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002844 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002845};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002846
2847/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002848 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2849 *
2850 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2851 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2852 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2853 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2854 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2855 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2856 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2857 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2858 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2859 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2860 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2861 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2862 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2863 */
2864struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2865 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2866 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2867 u16 tid;
2868 u16 ssn;
2869 u8 buf_size;
2870 bool amsdu;
2871 u16 timeout;
2872};
2873
2874/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002875 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2876 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002877 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2878 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002879 */
2880enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2881 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002882 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002883};
2884
2885/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002886 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2887 *
2888 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002889 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2890 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2891 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002892 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002893 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2894 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2895 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002896 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2897 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002898 */
2899enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2900 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2901 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002902 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002903 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002904};
2905
2906/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002907 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2908 *
2909 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2910 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2911 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2912 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2913 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2914 *
2915 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2916 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2917 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2918 */
2919enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2920 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2921 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2922};
2923
2924/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002925 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2926 *
2927 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2928 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2929 *
2930 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2931 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2932 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2933 * of wowlan configuration)
2934 */
2935enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2936 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2937 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2938};
2939
2940/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002941 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2942 *
2943 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2944 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2945 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2946 *
2947 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2948 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2949 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002950 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002951 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002952 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002953 *
2954 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2955 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2956 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2957 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2958 * or zero.
2959 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2960 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2961 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002962 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002963 *
2964 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2965 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2966 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2967 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002968 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2969 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002970 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002971 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002972 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2973 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2974 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2975 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2976 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002977 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2978 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2979 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2980 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002981 *
2982 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2983 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2984 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2985 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2986 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2987 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002988 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2989 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2990 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2991 * in suspend().
2992 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002993 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002994 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002995 * and @stop must be implemented.
2996 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2997 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2998 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2999 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3000 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003001 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003002 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003003 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3004 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3005 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3006 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3007 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3008 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003009 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3010 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3011 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3012 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3013 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3014 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3015 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003016 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003017 *
3018 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3019 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003020 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003021 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003022 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003023 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3024 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3025 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3026 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3027 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003028 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3029 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003030 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003031 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3032 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3033 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3034 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003035 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3036 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003037 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003038 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003039 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3040 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3041 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3042 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3043 * which flags are changed.
3044 * This callback can sleep.
3045 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003046 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003047 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003048 *
3049 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003050 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3051 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003052 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003053 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003054 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003055 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003056 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3057 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3058 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003059 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003060 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003061 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3062 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3063 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3064 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3065 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3066 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003067 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3068 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3069 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3070 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003071 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003072 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003073 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3074 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003075 * that power save is disabled.
3076 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3077 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3078 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3079 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3080 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3081 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3082 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003083 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003084 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003085 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3086 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3087 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3088 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3089 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3090 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3091 * The callback can sleep.
3092 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003093 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3094 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3095 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3096 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3097 *
3098 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003099 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003100 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003101 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3102 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003103 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3104 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3105 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003106 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003107 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3108 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3109 * this notification.
3110 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003111 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003112 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3113 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003114 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003115 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003116 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3117 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3118 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003119 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003120 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003121 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003122 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3123 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3124 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003125 * The callback can sleep.
3126 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003127 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003128 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003129 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003130 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3131 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3132 *
3133 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003134 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3135 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3136 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3137 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3138 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003139 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303140 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3141 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003142 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3143 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303144 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003145 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003146 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3147 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3148 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003149 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003150 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3151 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3152 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3153 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003154 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3155 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3156 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3157 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3158 * The callback can sleep.
3159 *
3160 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3161 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3162 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3163 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3164 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003165 * The callback can sleep.
3166 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003167 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3168 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3169 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3170 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3171 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3172 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3173 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003174 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3175 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3176 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003177 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003178 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3179 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3180 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3181 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3182 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3183 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3184 * The callback can sleep.
3185 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003186 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003187 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003188 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003189 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003190 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003191 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003192 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003193 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003194 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003195 *
3196 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003197 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003198 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003199 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003200 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003201 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3202 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3203 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3204 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3205 * The callback can sleep.
3206 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003207 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3208 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3209 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3210 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003211 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003212 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003213 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3214 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3215 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003216 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003217 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003218 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003219 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3220 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003221 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3222 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3223 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003224 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003225 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003226 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3227 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003228 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3229 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3230 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003231 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003232 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3233 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003234 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003235 *
3236 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003237 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3238 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3239 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3240 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003241 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003242 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003243 *
3244 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3245 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3246 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3247 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003248 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003249 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3250 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3251 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3252 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3253 *
3254 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003255 *
3256 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3257 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3258 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3259 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3260 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3261 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003262 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003263 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3264 * must be accepted in this case.
3265 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003266 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3267 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003268 *
3269 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3270 *
3271 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303272 *
3273 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3274 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303275 *
3276 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3277 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3278 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003279 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3280 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003281 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003282 *
3283 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3284 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3285 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3286 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003287 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003288 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3289 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3290 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3291 * more-data bit must always be set.
3292 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3293 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003294 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3295 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3296 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3297 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3298 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3299 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003300 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3301 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3302 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003303 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3304 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003305 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003306 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003307 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003308 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3309 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3310 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003311 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003312 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3313 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3314 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3315 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003316 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003317 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003318 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3319 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3320 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003321 *
3322 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3323 *
3324 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3325 *
3326 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3327 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3328 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003329 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3330 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3331 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3332 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3333 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3334 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3335 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3336 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3337 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3338 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3339 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3340 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003341 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003342 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3343 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3344 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3345 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3346 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3347 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3348 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3349 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3350 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003351 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303352 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003353 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303354 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003355 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3356 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3357 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303358 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003359 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3360 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303361 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003362 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3363 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303364 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003365 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3366 * another, as specified in the list of
3367 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3368 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303369 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003370 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003371 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3372 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3373 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3374 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3375 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3376 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3377 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003378 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003379 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3380 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3381 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3382 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3383 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003384 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003385 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3386 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3387 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003388 *
3389 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3390 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3391 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003392 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003393 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3394 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003395 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003396 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003397 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3398 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003399 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3400 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003401 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003402 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003403 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3404 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3405 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003406 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003407 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3408 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3409 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3410 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003411 *
3412 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3413 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3414 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003415 *
3416 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3417 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003418 *
3419 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3420 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3421 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3422 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3423 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3424 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3425 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3426 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3427 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003428 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3429 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3430 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3431 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3432 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3433 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3434 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003435 *
3436 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003437 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3438 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3439 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3440 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003441 *
3442 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3443 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003444 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3445 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3446 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3447 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3448 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3449 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003450 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3451 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3452 * this call.
3453 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3454 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3455 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003456 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003457struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003458 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3459 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3460 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003461 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003462 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003463#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3464 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3465 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003466 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003467#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003468 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003469 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003470 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3471 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003472 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003473 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003474 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003475 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003476 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3477 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3478 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3479 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003480
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003481 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3482 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3483
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003484 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003485 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003486 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3487 unsigned int changed_flags,
3488 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003489 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003490 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3492 unsigned int filter_flags,
3493 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003494 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3495 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003496 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003497 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003498 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003499 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3501 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3502 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3503 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003504 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3506 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003507 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3508 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003509 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003510 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003511 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003513 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3514 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3515 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003516 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003517 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003519 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3520 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3521 const u8 *mac_addr);
3522 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003524 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3525 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003526 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3527 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3528 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003529 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003530 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003531 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3532 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3533 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3534 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303535#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3536 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3537 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3538 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3539 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303540#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003541 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003542 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003543 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3544 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3545 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3546 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003547 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3548 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3549 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003550 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3551 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3552 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3553 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003554 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3556 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003557 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3558 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3559 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3560 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003561 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003562 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003563 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003564 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3565 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3566 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003567 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3568 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003569 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003570 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003571
3572 /**
3573 * @ampdu_action:
3574 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3575 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3576 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3577 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3578 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3579 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3580 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3581 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3582 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3583 *
3584 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3585 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3586 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3587 *
3588 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3589 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3590 *
3591 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3592 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3593 * - ``TX: 81``
3594 *
3595 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3596 *
3597 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3598 * The callback can sleep.
3599 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003600 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003601 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003602 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003603 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3604 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003605 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003606 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003607#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003608 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3609 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003610 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3611 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3612 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003613#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003614 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3615 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003616 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003617 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003618 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003619 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3620 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003621
3622 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003623 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003624 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003625 int duration,
3626 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003627 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003628 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3629 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3630 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303631 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303632 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3633 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003634 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3635 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3636 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003637
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003638 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3639 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3640 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3641 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3642 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003643 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3644 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3645 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3646 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3647 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003648
3649 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3650 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3651 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3653 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3654 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3655 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3656 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003657
3658 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3659 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003660
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003661 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3662 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3663
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003664 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3665 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3666 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3667 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3668 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3669 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3670 u32 changed);
3671 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3672 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3673 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3674 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3675 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3676 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003677 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3678 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3679 int n_vifs,
3680 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003681
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003682 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3683 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003684
3685#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3686 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3688 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3689#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003690 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3691 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3692 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003693 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3694 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3695 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003696
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003697 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3698 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3699
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003700 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3701 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003702 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3703 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003704 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3705 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003706
3707 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3708 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3709 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3710 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003711 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003712 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3713 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3714 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003715 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3716 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3717 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003718
3719 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3720 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003721 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003722
3723 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3724 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3725 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3726 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3727 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003728 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3729 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3730 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003731 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3732 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3733 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3734 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3735 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3736 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003737};
3738
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003739/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003740 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3741 *
3742 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3743 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3744 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3745 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3746 * @priv_data_len.
3747 *
3748 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3749 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3750 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3751 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3752 *
3753 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3754 */
3755struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3756 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3757 const char *requested_name);
3758
3759/**
3760 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003761 *
3762 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3763 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3764 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3765 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3766 * @priv_data_len.
3767 *
3768 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3769 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003770 *
3771 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003772 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003773static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003774struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003775 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3776{
3777 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3778}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003779
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003780/**
3781 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3782 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003783 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3784 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3785 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003786 *
3787 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003788 *
3789 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003790 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003791int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3792
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003793/**
3794 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3795 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3796 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3797 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3798 */
3799struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3800 int throughput;
3801 int blink_time;
3802};
3803
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003804/**
3805 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3806 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3807 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3808 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3809 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3810 */
3811enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3812 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3813 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3814 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3815};
3816
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003817#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003818const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3819const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3820const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3821const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3822const char *
3823__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3824 unsigned int flags,
3825 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3826 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003827#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003828/**
3829 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3830 *
3831 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3832 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3833 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3834 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3835 *
3836 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003837 *
3838 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003839 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003840static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003841{
3842#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3843 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3844#else
3845 return NULL;
3846#endif
3847}
3848
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003849/**
3850 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3851 *
3852 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3853 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3854 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3855 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3856 *
3857 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003858 *
3859 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003860 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003861static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003862{
3863#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3864 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3865#else
3866 return NULL;
3867#endif
3868}
3869
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003870/**
3871 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3872 *
3873 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3874 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3875 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3876 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3877 *
3878 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003879 *
3880 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003881 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003882static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003883{
3884#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3885 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3886#else
3887 return NULL;
3888#endif
3889}
3890
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003891/**
3892 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3893 *
3894 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3895 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3896 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3897 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3898 *
3899 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003900 *
3901 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003902 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003903static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003904{
3905#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3906 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3907#else
3908 return NULL;
3909#endif
3910}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003911
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003912/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003913 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3914 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003915 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003916 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3917 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3918 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003919 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3920 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3921 *
3922 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003923 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003924static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003925ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003926 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3927 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3928{
3929#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003930 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003931 blink_table_len);
3932#else
3933 return NULL;
3934#endif
3935}
3936
3937/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003938 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3939 *
3940 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3941 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3942 *
3943 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3944 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003945void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3946
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003947/**
3948 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3949 *
3950 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3951 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003952 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003953 *
3954 * @hw: the hardware to free
3955 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003956void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3957
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003958/**
3959 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3960 *
3961 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3962 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3963 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3964 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3965 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3966 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3967 *
3968 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3969 */
3970void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3971
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003972/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003973 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003974 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003975 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3976 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3977 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3978 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3979 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3980 *
3981 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3982 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3983 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3984 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3985 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3986 *
3987 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3988 *
3989 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003990 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003991 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3992 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003993 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003994void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3995 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003996
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003997/**
3998 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3999 *
4000 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004001 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4002 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4003 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4004 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004005 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004006 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004007 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4008 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004009 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4010 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004011 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004012 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004013 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004014 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4015 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004016 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004017static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4018{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004019 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004020}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004021
4022/**
4023 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4024 *
4025 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004026 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4027 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004028 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004029 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4030 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004031 *
4032 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4033 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004034 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004035void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004036
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004037/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004038 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4039 *
4040 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4041 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4042 *
4043 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004044 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4045 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004046 *
4047 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4048 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4049 */
4050static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4051 struct sk_buff *skb)
4052{
4053 local_bh_disable();
4054 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4055 local_bh_enable();
4056}
4057
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004058/**
4059 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4060 *
4061 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4062 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4063 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4064 *
4065 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4066 *
4067 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4068 * each other.
4069 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004070 * @sta: currently connected sta
4071 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004072 *
4073 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004074 */
4075int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4076
4077/**
4078 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4079 * (in process context)
4080 *
4081 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4082 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4083 * applies.
4084 *
4085 * @sta: currently connected sta
4086 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004087 *
4088 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004089 */
4090static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4091 bool start)
4092{
4093 int ret;
4094
4095 local_bh_disable();
4096 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4097 local_bh_enable();
4098
4099 return ret;
4100}
4101
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004102/**
4103 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4104 * @sta: currently connected station
4105 *
4106 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4107 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4108 * connected station was received.
4109 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4110 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4111 * be serialized.
4112 */
4113void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4114
4115/**
4116 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4117 * @sta: currently connected station
4118 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4119 *
4120 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4121 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4122 * from a connected station was received.
4123 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4124 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4125 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004126 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4127 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4128 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4129 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004130 */
4131void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4132
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004133/*
4134 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4135 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4136 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004137#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004138
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004139/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004140 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004141 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004142 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4143 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004144 *
4145 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004146 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4147 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004148 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004149 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4150 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4151 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4152 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4153 *
4154 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4155 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4156 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4157 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4158 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4159 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4160 *
4161 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4162 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4163 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4164 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4165 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004166 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004167void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4168 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004169
4170/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004171 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4172 *
4173 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4174 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4175 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4176 *
4177 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4178 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4179 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4180 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4181 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4182 */
4183void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4184 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4185 struct sk_buff *skb,
4186 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4187 int max_rates);
4188
4189/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004190 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4191 *
4192 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4193 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4194 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4195 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004196 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4197 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004198 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004199 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4200 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004201 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004202 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4203 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004204 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004205void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004206 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004207
4208/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004209 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4210 *
4211 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4212 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4213 * specific skbs.
4214 *
4215 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4216 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4217 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4218 *
4219 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4220 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4221 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4222 * @info: tx status information
4223 */
4224void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4225 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4226 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4227
4228/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004229 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4230 *
4231 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4232 *
4233 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4234 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4235 * for a single hardware.
4236 *
4237 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4238 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4239 */
4240static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4241 struct sk_buff *skb)
4242{
4243 local_bh_disable();
4244 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4245 local_bh_enable();
4246}
4247
4248/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004249 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004250 *
4251 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4252 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4253 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004254 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4255 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004256 *
4257 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4258 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004259 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004260void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004261 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004262
4263/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004264 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4265 *
4266 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4267 * connected STA.
4268 *
4269 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4270 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4271 */
4272void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4273
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004274#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4275
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004276/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004277 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4278 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4279 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004280 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4281 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4282 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004283 */
4284struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4285 u16 tim_offset;
4286 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004287
4288 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004289};
4290
4291/**
4292 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4293 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4294 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4295 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4296 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4297 *
4298 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4299 * obtain the beacon template.
4300 *
4301 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4302 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004303 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4304 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004305 *
4306 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4307 *
4308 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4309 */
4310struct sk_buff *
4311ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4312 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4313 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4314
4315/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004316 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4317 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004318 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004319 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4320 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4321 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4322 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4323 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4324 *
4325 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004326 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004327 *
4328 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4329 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004330 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4331 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004332 *
4333 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004334 *
4335 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004336 */
4337struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4338 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4339 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4340
4341/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004342 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4343 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004344 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004345 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004346 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004347 *
4348 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004349 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004350static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4351 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4352{
4353 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4354}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004355
4356/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004357 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4358 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4359 *
4360 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4361 * This function is called implicitly when
4362 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4363 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4364 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4365 *
4366 * Return: new csa counter value
4367 */
4368u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4369
4370/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004371 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4372 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4373 *
4374 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004375 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004376 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4377 */
4378void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4379
4380/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004381 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004382 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4383 *
4384 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4385 */
4386bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4387
4388
4389/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004390 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4391 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4392 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4393 *
4394 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4395 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4396 *
4397 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004398 *
4399 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004400 */
4401struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4402 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4403
4404/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004405 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4406 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4407 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4408 *
4409 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4410 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4411 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4412 *
4413 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4414 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004415 *
4416 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004417 */
4418struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4419 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4420
4421/**
4422 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4423 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4424 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4425 *
4426 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4427 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4428 * BSSID and address is used.
4429 *
4430 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4431 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004432 *
4433 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004434 */
4435struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4436 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4437
4438/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004439 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4440 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004441 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004442 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4443 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004444 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004445 *
4446 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4447 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004448 *
4449 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004450 */
4451struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004452 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004453 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004454 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004455
4456/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004457 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4458 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004459 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004460 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4461 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004462 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004463 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4464 *
4465 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4466 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4467 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4468 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4469 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004470void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004471 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004472 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004473 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4474
4475/**
4476 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4477 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004478 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004479 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004480 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004481 *
4482 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4483 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4484 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004485 *
4486 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004487 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004488__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004490 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004491
4492/**
4493 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4494 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004495 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004496 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4497 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004498 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004499 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4500 *
4501 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4502 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4503 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4504 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4505 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004506void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4507 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004508 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004509 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004510 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4511
4512/**
4513 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4514 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004515 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004516 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004517 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004518 *
4519 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4520 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4521 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004522 *
4523 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004524 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004525__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4526 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004527 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004528 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004529
4530/**
4531 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4532 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004533 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004534 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004535 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004536 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004537 *
4538 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4539 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004540 *
4541 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004542 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004543__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4544 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004545 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004546 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004547 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004548
4549/**
4550 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4551 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004552 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004553 *
4554 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4555 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4556 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4557 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004558 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4559 *
4560 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4561 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004562 *
4563 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4564 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4565 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4566 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4567 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4568 * use common code for all beacons.
4569 */
4570struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004571ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004572
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004573/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004574 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4575 *
4576 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4577 *
4578 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4579 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4580 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4581 */
4582void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4583 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4584
4585/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004586 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004587 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004588 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4589 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004590 *
4591 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004592 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4593 * with this P1K
4594 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004595 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004596static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4597 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4598{
4599 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4600 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4601 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4602
4603 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4604}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004605
4606/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004607 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4608 *
4609 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4610 * and transmitter address.
4611 *
4612 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4613 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4614 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4615 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4616 */
4617void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4618 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4619
4620/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004621 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4622 *
4623 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4624 * in the packet.
4625 *
4626 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4627 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4628 * encrypted with this key
4629 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4630 */
4631void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4632 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004633
4634/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004635 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4636 *
4637 * @pos: start of crypto header
4638 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4639 * @pn: PN to add
4640 *
4641 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4642 * the packet payload)
4643 *
4644 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4645 * point to the crypto header)
4646 */
4647u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4648
4649/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004650 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4651 *
4652 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004653 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004654 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4655 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4656 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4657 *
4658 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4659 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4660 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4661 *
4662 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4663 * can be done concurrently.
4664 */
4665void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4666 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4667
4668/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004669 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4670 *
4671 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004672 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004673 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4674 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4675 * @seq: new sequence data
4676 *
4677 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4678 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4679 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4680 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4681 *
4682 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4683 * can be done concurrently.
4684 */
4685void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4686 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4687
4688/**
4689 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4690 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4691 *
4692 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4693 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4694 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4695 *
4696 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4697 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4698 */
4699void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4700
4701/**
4702 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4703 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4704 * @keyconf: new key data
4705 *
4706 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4707 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4708 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4709 *
4710 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4711 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4712 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4713 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4714 *
4715 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4716 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4717 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4718 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4719 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4720 * of the reconfiguration.
4721 *
4722 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4723 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4724 *
4725 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4726 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4727 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4728 * the key that's being replaced.
4729 */
4730struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4731ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4732 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4733
4734/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004735 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4736 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4737 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4738 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4739 * @gfp: allocation flags
4740 */
4741void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4742 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4743
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004744/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004745 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4746 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4747 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4748 *
4749 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4750 */
4751void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4752
4753/**
4754 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4755 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4756 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4757 *
4758 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4759 */
4760void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4761
4762/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004763 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4764 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4765 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4766 *
4767 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004768 *
4769 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004770 */
4771
4772int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4773
4774/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004775 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4776 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4777 *
4778 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4779 */
4780void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4781
4782/**
4783 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4784 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4785 *
4786 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4787 */
4788void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4789
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004790/**
4791 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4792 *
4793 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4794 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004795 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4796 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004797 *
4798 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004799 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004800 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004801void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4802 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004803
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004804/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004805 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4806 *
4807 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4808 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4809 *
4810 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4811 */
4812void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4813
4814/**
4815 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4816 *
4817 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4818 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4819 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4820 * while associating, for instance.
4821 *
4822 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4823 */
4824void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4825
4826/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004827 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4828 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4829 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4830 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4831 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4832 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4833 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4834 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004835 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004836 */
4837enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4838 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4839 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004840 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004841};
4842
4843/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004844 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4845 *
4846 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4847 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4848 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4849 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4850 *
4851 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4852 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4853 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4854 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4855 */
4856void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4857 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4858 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4859 void *data);
4860
4861/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004862 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004863 *
4864 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4865 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004866 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4867 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4868 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004869 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004870 *
4871 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004872 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004873 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004874 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4875 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004876static inline void
4877ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4878 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4879 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4880 void *data)
4881{
4882 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4883 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4884 iterator, data);
4885}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004886
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004887/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004888 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4889 *
4890 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4891 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4892 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4893 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004894 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004895 *
4896 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004897 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004898 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4899 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4900 */
4901void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004902 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004903 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4904 u8 *mac,
4905 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4906 void *data);
4907
4908/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004909 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4910 *
4911 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4912 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4913 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4914 *
4915 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4916 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4917 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4918 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4919 */
4920void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4921 u32 iter_flags,
4922 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4923 u8 *mac,
4924 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4925 void *data);
4926
4927/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004928 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4929 *
4930 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4931 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4932 * function for them.
4933 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4934 *
4935 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4936 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4937 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4938 */
4939void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4940 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4941 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4942 void *data);
4943/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004944 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4945 *
4946 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4947 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4948 *
4949 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4950 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4951 */
4952void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4953
4954/**
4955 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4956 *
4957 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4958 * workqueue.
4959 *
4960 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4961 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4962 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4963 */
4964void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4965 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4966 unsigned long delay);
4967
4968/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004969 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004970 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004971 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304972 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004973 *
4974 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004975 *
4976 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4977 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4978 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4979 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304980int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4981 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004982
4983/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004984 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004985 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004986 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4987 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4988 *
4989 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004990 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4991 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004992 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004993void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004994 u16 tid);
4995
4996/**
4997 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004998 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004999 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005000 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005001 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005002 *
5003 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5004 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5005 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5006 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005007int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005008
5009/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005010 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005011 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005012 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5013 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5014 *
5015 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005016 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5017 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005018 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005019void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005020 u16 tid);
5021
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005022/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005023 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5024 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005025 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005026 * @addr: station's address
5027 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005028 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5029 *
5030 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005031 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5032 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005033struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005034 const u8 *addr);
5035
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005036/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005037 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005038 *
5039 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005040 * @addr: remote station's address
5041 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005042 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005043 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5044 *
5045 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005046 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5047 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005048 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5049 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5050 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5051 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5052 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5053 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5054 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005055 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005056 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005057 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005058struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5059 const u8 *addr,
5060 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005061
5062/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005063 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5064 * @hw: the hardware
5065 * @pubsta: the station
5066 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5067 *
5068 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5069 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5070 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5071 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5072 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5073 *
5074 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5075 * manner.
5076 *
5077 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5078 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5079 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5080 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5081 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5082 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5083 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5084 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5085 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5086 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5087 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5088 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5089 * woke up while blocked or not.
5090 */
5091void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5092 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5093
5094/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005095 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5096 * @pubsta: the station
5097 *
5098 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5099 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5100 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5101 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5102 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005103 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5104 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5105 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5106 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5107 *
5108 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5109 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5110 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5111 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005112 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005113void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005114
5115/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005116 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5117 * @pubsta: the station
5118 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5119 *
5120 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5121 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5122 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5123 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5124 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5125 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5126 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5127 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5128 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5129 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5130 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5131 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5132 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5133 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5134 */
5135void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5136
5137/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005138 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5139 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5140 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5141 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5142 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5143 *
5144 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5145 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5146 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5147 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5148 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5149 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005150 *
5151 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5152 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5153 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005154 */
5155void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5156 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5157 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5158 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5159 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5160 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5161 void *data),
5162 void *iter_data);
5163
5164/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005165 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5166 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5167 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5168 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5169 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5170 *
5171 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5172 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5173 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5174 * in removal process will be skipped.
5175 *
5176 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5177 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5178 */
5179void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5180 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5181 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5183 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5184 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5185 void *data),
5186 void *iter_data);
5187
5188/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005189 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5190 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5191 * @iter: iterator function
5192 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5193 *
5194 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5195 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5196 * places while calling into the driver.
5197 *
5198 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5199 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5200 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005201 *
5202 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5203 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5204 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5205 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005206 */
5207void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5208 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5209 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5210 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5211 void *data),
5212 void *iter_data);
5213
5214/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005215 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5216 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5217 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5218 *
5219 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5220 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5221 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5222 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5223 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005224 * %NULL.
5225 *
5226 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005227 */
5228struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5230
5231/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005232 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5233 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005234 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005235 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005236 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005237 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005238 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5239 */
5240void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005241
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005242/**
5243 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5244 *
5245 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5246 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005247 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005248 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5249 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005250 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5251 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005252 *
5253 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5254 * without connection recovery attempts.
5255 */
5256void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5257
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005258/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005259 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5260 *
5261 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5262 *
5263 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5264 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5265 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5266 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5267 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5268 *
5269 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5270 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5271 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5272 * disconnect normally later.
5273 *
5274 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5275 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5276 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5277 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5278 */
5279void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5280
5281/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005282 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5283 * rssi threshold triggered
5284 *
5285 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5286 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005287 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005288 * @gfp: context flags
5289 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005290 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005291 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5292 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5293 */
5294void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5295 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005296 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005297 gfp_t gfp);
5298
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005299/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005300 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5301 *
5302 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5303 * @gfp: context flags
5304 */
5305void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5306
5307/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005308 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5309 *
5310 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5311 */
5312void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5313
5314/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005315 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5316 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5317 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5318 *
5319 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5320 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5321 */
5322void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5323
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005324/**
5325 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5326 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005327 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005328 *
5329 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5330 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5331 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5332 */
5333void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5334 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5335
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005336/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005337 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5338 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5339 */
5340void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5341
5342/**
5343 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5344 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5345 */
5346void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5347
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005348/**
5349 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5350 *
5351 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5352 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5353 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5354 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5355 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5356 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5357 *
5358 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5359 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5360 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5361 */
5362void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5363 const u8 *addr);
5364
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005365/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005366 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5367 * @pubsta: station struct
5368 * @tid: the session's TID
5369 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5370 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5371 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5372 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5373 *
5374 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5375 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5376 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5377 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5378 */
5379void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5380 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5381 u16 received_mpdus);
5382
5383/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005384 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5385 *
5386 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5387 * buffer.
5388 *
5389 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5390 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5391 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5392 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5393 */
5394void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5395
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005396/**
5397 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5398 *
5399 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5400 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5401 * reordering.
5402 *
5403 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5404 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5405 *
5406 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5407 * @addr: station mac address
5408 * @tid: the rx tid
5409 */
5410void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5411 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5412
5413/**
5414 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5415 *
5416 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5417 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5418 * reordering.
5419 *
5420 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5421 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5422 *
5423 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5424 * @addr: station mac address
5425 * @tid: the rx tid
5426 */
5427void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5428 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5429
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005430/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005431
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005432/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005433 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005434 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005435 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5436 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5437 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005438 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5439 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005440 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5441 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5442 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5443 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5444 * RTS threshold
5445 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5446 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005447 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005448 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5449 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005450 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005451 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005452 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005453 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005454struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5455 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5456 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5457 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5458 struct sk_buff *skb;
5459 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5460 bool rts, short_preamble;
5461 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005462 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005463 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005464 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005465};
5466
5467struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005468 const char *name;
5469 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005470 void (*free)(void *priv);
5471
5472 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5473 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005474 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005475 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305476 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005477 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005478 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5479 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005480 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5481 void *priv_sta);
5482
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005483 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5484 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5485 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5486 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005487 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5488 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5489 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005490 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5491 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005492
5493 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5494 struct dentry *dir);
5495 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005496
5497 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005498};
5499
5500static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005501 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005502 int index)
5503{
5504 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5505}
5506
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005507/**
5508 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5509 *
5510 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5511 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5512 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5513 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5514 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5515 * not null.
5516 *
5517 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5518 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5519 *
5520 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5521 * that this may be null.
5522 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5523 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5524 */
5525bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5526 void *priv_sta,
5527 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5528
5529
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005530static inline s8
5531rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5532 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5533{
5534 int i;
5535
5536 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5537 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5538 return i;
5539
5540 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005541 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005542
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005543 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005544 return 0;
5545}
5546
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005547static inline
5548bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5549 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5550{
5551 unsigned int i;
5552
5553 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5554 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5555 return true;
5556 return false;
5557}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005558
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005559/**
5560 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5561 *
5562 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5563 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5564 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5565 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5566 *
5567 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5568 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5569 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5570 */
5571int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5572 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5573 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5574
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005575int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5576void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005577
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005578static inline bool
5579conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5580{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005581 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005582}
5583
5584static inline bool
5585conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5586{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005587 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5588 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005589}
5590
5591static inline bool
5592conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5593{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005594 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5595 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005596}
5597
5598static inline bool
5599conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5600{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005601 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005602}
5603
5604static inline bool
5605conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5606{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005607 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5608 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5609 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005610}
5611
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005612static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5613ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5614{
5615 if (p2p) {
5616 switch (type) {
5617 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5618 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5619 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5620 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5621 default:
5622 break;
5623 }
5624 }
5625 return type;
5626}
5627
5628static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5629ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5630{
5631 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5632}
5633
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005634/**
5635 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5636 *
5637 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5638 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5639 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5640 *
5641 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5642 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5643 * matching GroupId management frame.
5644 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5645 */
5646void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5647 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5648
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005649void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5650 int rssi_min_thold,
5651 int rssi_max_thold);
5652
5653void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005654
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005655/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005656 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005657 *
5658 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5659 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005660 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5661 *
5662 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5663 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005664 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005665int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5666
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005667/**
5668 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5669 * @vif: virtual interface
5670 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5671 * @gfp: allocation flags
5672 *
5673 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5674 */
5675void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5676 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5677 gfp_t gfp);
5678
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005679/**
5680 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5681 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5682 * @vif: virtual interface
5683 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5684 * @band: the band to transmit on
5685 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5686 *
5687 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5688 */
5689bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5691 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5692
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005693/**
5694 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5695 *
5696 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5697 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5698 *
5699 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5700 *
5701 * private:
5702 *
5703 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5704 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5705 */
5706struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5707 u32 next_tsf;
5708 bool has_next_tsf;
5709
5710 u8 absent;
5711
5712 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5713 struct {
5714 u32 start;
5715 u32 duration;
5716 u32 interval;
5717 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5718};
5719
5720/**
5721 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5722 *
5723 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5724 * @data: NoA tracking data
5725 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5726 *
5727 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5728 */
5729int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5730 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5731
5732/**
5733 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5734 *
5735 * @data: NoA tracking data
5736 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5737 */
5738void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5739
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005740/**
5741 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5742 * @vif: virtual interface
5743 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5744 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5745 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5746 * @gfp: allocation flags
5747 *
5748 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5749 */
5750void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5751 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5752 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005753
5754/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005755 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5756 *
5757 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5758 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5759 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5760 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5761 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5762 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5763 *
5764 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5765 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5766 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5767 *
5768 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5769 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5770 *
5771 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5772 */
5773int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5774
5775/**
5776 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5777 *
5778 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5779 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5780 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5781 *
5782 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5783 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5784 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5785 *
5786 * @sta: the station
5787 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5788 */
5789void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5790
5791/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005792 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5793 *
5794 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5795 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5796 *
5797 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5798 */
5799struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5800 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005801
5802/**
5803 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5804 *
5805 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5806 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5807 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5808 *
5809 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5810 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5811 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5812 */
5813void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5814 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5815 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005816
5817/**
5818 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5819 *
5820 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5821 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5822 *
5823 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5824 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5825 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5826 * @gfp: allocation flags
5827 */
5828void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5829 u8 inst_id,
5830 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5831 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005832
5833/**
5834 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5835 *
5836 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5837 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5838 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5839 *
5840 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5841 * @match: match event information
5842 * @gfp: allocation flags
5843 */
5844void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5845 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5846 gfp_t gfp);
5847
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005848#endif /* MAC80211_H */